operation manual

ManualsBrandsPhilips ManualsLED TVs55PFK7199/12

www.philips.com/welcome

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

Summary of content (115 pages)

PAGE 1
Register your product and get support at www.philips.
PAGE 2
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪1.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪HD Ultra‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ 1.2‬ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫‪) 1.3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ( ‪App gallery‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ 1.4‬ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ 1.5‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪Ambilight+hue 1.6‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪Skype 1.7‬‬ ‫‪ 1.8‬ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1.9‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪ 01.1‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪EasyLink 1.11‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2.1‬‬ ‫‪2.2‬‬ ‫‪2.3‬‬ ‫‪2.4‬‬ ‫‪2.5‬‬ ‫‪2.6‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.1‬‬ ‫‪3.2‬‬ ‫‪3.3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪6.8‬‬ ‫‪6.
PAGE 3
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪18.4 Skype‬‬ ‫‪ 81.5‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫‪ 81.6‬ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪18.7 Skype‬‬ ‫‪65‬‬ ‫ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ‪18.8 Skype‬‬ ‫‪65‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪18.9 Skype‬‬ ‫‪67‬‬ ‫‪ 01.81‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬ ‫‪67‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ‪18.11 Skype‬‬ ‫‪ 21.81‬ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪72.1‬‬ ‫‪72.2‬‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫‪91‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫‪82‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ‬ ‫‪82.1‬‬ ‫‪82.2‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫‪67‬‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪19.1 TV Smart‬‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫‪ 91.
PAGE 4
‫‪1.3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ( ‪App gallery‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕﻓﻲ ‪ TV Smart‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤّﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪HD Ultra‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ YouTube‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﺤﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ‪ Facebook‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Twitter‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺰﻭّﺩ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ .Ultra HD‬ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺩﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ‪ 4‬ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 5
‫‪1.8‬‬ ‫‪1.6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪Ambilight+hue‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪Philips MyRemote‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‪ ، Ambilight+hue‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ‪Philips‬‬ ‫‪hue‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ Ambilight‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻮﺳّﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ‪ hue Philips‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪ Ambilight‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪ .
PAGE 6
‫‪) Recording‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1.10‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪّﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻻﻋﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻌﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺘﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 7
‫• ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪-50 6800‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪VESA MIS-F 400x200، M6‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪-40 6800‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪VESA MIS-F 200x100، M6‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪-40 6700‬ﺑﻮﺻة‪-48/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪VESA MIS-F 400x200، M6‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪-55 6600‬ﺑﻮﺻة‪-65/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪VESA MIS-F 400x400, M6‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪-40 6600‬ﺑﻮﺻة‪-48/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪VESA MIS-F 400x200، M6‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪-55 6500‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪VESA MIS-F 400x400, M6‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪-32 6500‬ﺑﻮﺻة‪-42/‬ﺑﻮﺻة‪-47
PAGE 8
‫ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻃﻼﻗﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺟﺪًﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‪)Help‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬ ‫‪)Keywords‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ‪) on Switching‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2.5‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 9
‫• ﻣﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩﻣﺴﺢﻟﻠﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﺤﺜًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻨﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪WPS‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ‪ ،WPS‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪WPS‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ WPS.
PAGE 10
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬّﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.5‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬّﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﻭﺻّﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺇﻳﺜﻴﺮﻧﺖ**(‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .
PAGE 11
‫™‪.Miracast‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪direct Fi-Wi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻈﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ‪.Miracast‬‬ ‫• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Fi-Wi‬ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Fi-Wi‬ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Keywords ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ‪MyRemote‬‬ ‫‪ MyRemote)، Wi-Fi smart screen‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ( ‪.App‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪MyRemote‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﻲ‪...
PAGE 12
‫‪EasyLink HDMI CEC‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺗﻚ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ‪EasyLink،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ CEC HDMI EasyLink‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪،EasyLink‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) Keywords ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫‪.EasyLink CEC‬‬ ‫‪4.
PAGE 13
‫ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪Y Pb Pr -‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ Pr Pb Y‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ YPbPr‬ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ .HD‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Y‬ﻭ‪ Pb‬ﻭ ‪ ،Pr‬ﺃﺿﻒ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻙ ‪ Y‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.CVBS‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮّﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛّﺐ ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﻥﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﺼﺮﻱﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1.
PAGE 14
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ EasyLink‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ CEC HDMI‬ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪EasyLink‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ EasyLink‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ EasyLink‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،EasyLink‬ﺣﺪﺩﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ‪EasyLink‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪HDMI-CEC‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ CEC HDMI‬ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻫﻲ‪ Anynet :‬ﻭ‪ Link Aquos‬ﻭ‪Bravia‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻌﺪُﺗ ﻻ ‪Viera Link.
PAGE 15
‫‪CAM‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ ‪CAM‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ ‪-‬‬ ‫‪CAM.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CAM‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳؤﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﻗّﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗّﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ .
PAGE 16
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗّﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ .STB‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﺪﺓ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷة؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 17
‫< ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ‪TV settings‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ‪Setup‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ( < )ﺻﻮﺕ( ‪) < Sound‬ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ( ‪< Advanced‬‬ ‫‪.HDMI ARC‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺮﺡ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻣﺰﻭّﺩ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ Digital Dolby‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ®DTS‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ "ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ" ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ"‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ .
PAGE 18
‫‪4.9‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪CVBS -‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺮﻛّﺐ‬ ‫‪.‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻛﺒﻞ )‪(CVBS‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪Y Pb Pr -‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜّﻢ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮّﻥ )‪Pb Y‬‬ ‫‪.‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻛﺒﻞ )‪Pr‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻙ ‪ Y‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.CVBS‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮّﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛّﺐ ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4.
PAGE 19
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪4.11‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) GUIDE TV ‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ(ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ" ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻّﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪) USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ (HID-USB‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﻳﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SOURCE ‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) EXIT ‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ(ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻃًﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.
PAGE 21
‫• ﻳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻙ ‪ Y‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.CVBS‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮّﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛّﺐ ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4.14‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫‪4.15‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ /Scart‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪CVBS -‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ YPbPr‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SCART‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .
PAGE 22
‫ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺯﺭ ﻣؤﺷﺮ ‪ LED‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ، ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ < ﺻﻮﺕ < ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ ‪ 5‬ﺣﺪﺩ‪) Wireless speaker‬ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ( < ‪Add new‬‬‫‪) speaker‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪6‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 23
‫‪5.2‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﻳﺴﺘﻴﻚ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻤ‪/‬ﺎﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﻳﺴﺘﻴﻚ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 24
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪6.1‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪7500 ،7100‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪) TV SMART  - 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ‪.TV Smart‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ‪، ‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) INFO  - 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) BACK  - 4‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ(‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ TV Smart‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SUBTITLE - 3‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) LIST  - 4‬ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ(‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Channel  - 5‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ(‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻂ‬ ‫‪) Mute  - 6‬ﻛﺘﻢ(‬ ‫ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪TEXT - 7‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪/‬ﻧﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6.
PAGE 26
‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) LIST  - 4‬ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ(‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪Cyrillic‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Qwerty‬‬ ‫‪) Channel  - 5‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ(‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Shift  - 3‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Mute  - 6‬ﻛﺘﻢ(‬ ‫ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻪ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ Qwerty‬ﻭ ‪Azerty‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪Fn‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ Fn‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫‪QWERTY.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪Azerty‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ Fn‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ www.‬ﺃﻭ ‪..com‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Azerty‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 28
‫‪6.6‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ < ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻤﻴﻦ ‪) ‬ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﻘﺎﺻﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ( ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﻴّﻨﺘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴّﻦ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‬‫ﻭﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻗﻠﻮﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ . AA-LR6-1.5V‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ‪ +‬ﻭ ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﺍﺀ ﺣﺘﻰ‬‫ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 5‬ﻋﺎﻭﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪) Philips‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 10‬ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮﺍﺕ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.
PAGE 30
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪7.1‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺗﻀﻢّ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺗﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪LIST ‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻛﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻔﻀّﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮﻱ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻً ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﻃﻔﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗِﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻳﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻋﻤﺮﻱ ‪. . .
PAGE 32
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ )ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ( ‪.Universal access‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻴﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻳﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺚ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ( ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪. . .
PAGE 33
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ < ﻟﻐﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻧﺺ ‪.P.O.T‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻧﺺ ‪ .P.O.T‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OPTIONS ‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ(ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ( ‪T.O.P. overview‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.(.P.O.T‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ‪OPTIONS‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪. . .
PAGE 34
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ)ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ‪ Channel settings‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪Languages‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ(> )ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻟﻐﺔ( ‪ Primary subtitles language‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻟﻐﺔ( ‪ Secondary subtitles language‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.OK‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ، ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 35
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ this channel (HBB TV‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3 -‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪. OK‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺤﺪّﺙ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪iTV‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪iTV‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻮﻙ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ‪ HbbTV‬ﺃﻭ ‪ iTV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4 -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪Philips.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫<ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬ ‫<ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ .OK‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .
PAGE 37
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩﻣﻌﺪﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ DVB‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ < ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ < ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ )‪ (T-DVB‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ )‪ (C-DVB‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ DVB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) Keywords ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ‪CAM - Conditional Access Module‬‬ ‫)‪ - CAM‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺑﺚ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﻗﻮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻴًﺎ ﺧﺎﺻًﺎ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﺤﺴﻴﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ‪ Setup‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪8.1‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪ .OK‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺃﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﻤّﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8.
PAGE 40
‫ ‪5‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀّﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8.4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫)ﺧﺮﻭﺝ( ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪8.5‬‬ ‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻛﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ)ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ( ‪Favourites‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 4‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .
PAGE 42
‫ﻓﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤّﻦ‪ .‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺃﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺃﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪.Unicable‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫‪ - 1‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Philips‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫‪www.philips.com/support‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ OK‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪OK‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺣﺪﺩﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪OK‬ﻭﺃﻛّﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪6‬‬ ‫ ﺣﺪﺩﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ "ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻗﻤﺮ‬‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ ﺻﺒﺎﺣًﺎ‪ .
PAGE 44
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ‪ Setup‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ < ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ < ﻭﺻﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ <‬‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ /‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ - 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪+‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ - 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OK‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺮﺳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ‪ Setup‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪.OK‬‬ ‫<ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ < ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ - 3‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪ LNB/‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻋﻴّﻦﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.
PAGE 46
‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ‪ TV Smart‬ﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Skype‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪. ‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻃًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪.
PAGE 47
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻸﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ )ﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ‪ 8‬ﺃﻳﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺪٍ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪10.1‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ + ‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪  ‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) OPTIONS ‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪Change‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ( ‪.day‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ)ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ( ‪ Previous day‬ﺃﻭ )ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ( ‪ Today‬ﺃﻭ ‪Next day‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪ ،OK‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪.
PAGE 48
‫‪11‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ( ‪ connections‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪. OK‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪11.2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪11.1‬‬ ‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗّﺘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂﻣؤﻗّﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ < ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ، ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪12.
PAGE 50
‫‪13.3‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪13.1‬‬ ‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺤﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬‫ ‪2‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺐ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺐ ‪2‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬‫‪ 4 -‬ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﻚ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪13.
PAGE 51
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺮﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ )ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻦ( ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺧﺪﺷﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﺭﺫﺍﺫ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ )ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻻﻋﺒﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻻﻋﺒﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﺐ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻻﻋﺒﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﺐ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻟﻬﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺷﻌﻮﺭﻫﻢ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺍﻧﺰﻋﺎﺝ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭٍ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻧﺤﺒّﺬ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ .(.‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﺪﺩًﺍ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺯﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻬﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.
PAGE 53
‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪14.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‪) Keywords ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻭ‪Game‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪،‬ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ( ‪.console, connect‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻻﻋﺒَﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻭﺟﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ‪ PTA507 Philips -‬ﺃﻭ ‪ PTA508‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ PTA519.
PAGE 54
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻻﻋﺒَﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻼﻋﺒَﻴﻦ ﺍﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺘَﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﺸﻄﺘﻴﻦ ‪-‬‬ ‫‪)PTA436Philips‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻻﻋﺒَﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻻﻋﺒَﻴﻦ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SOURCES ‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻻﻋﺒﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻻﻋﺒَﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ‪) Photos ‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺃﻭ ‪)‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪ Music‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) Videos ‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‪) Folders ‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ(ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺗﻚ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫‪15.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳًﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) Sort ‬ﻓﺮﺯ(‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﻟﻺﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ‪ 4‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ‪ 8‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ‪16‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ‪ 32‬ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Music ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) all Play ‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Miracast‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Miracast‬ﻓﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰًﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪.Miracast‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩﻣﻨﻊ ‪ . . .‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Miracast‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻃﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Miracast‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 58
‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪Pause TV‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻻﺣﻘًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‬ ‫ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻗﺼﺎﻫﺎ ‪ 90‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪).‬ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪Pause‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﺒﺮﻫﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 59
‫ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) Record ‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OPTIONS ‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ‪ .Record‬ﻳﻀﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺘًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪17.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ)ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ( ‪ Schedule‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪ .OK‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 60
‫‪17.3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫‪) Recordings‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ، ‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪‬‬‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ ‪ - 2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪‬‬‫‪) Play‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪‬‬ ‫‪) Forward‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ(‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‪‬‬ ‫‪) Rewind‬ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ( ﺃﻭ‪) Pause ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣؤﻗﺖ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪. ‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪Stop‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺘﻪ‪.
PAGE 61
‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠّﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Skype‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﺍﺳﻢ ‪Skype‬ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ Skype‬ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪18.1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪…Skype‬‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ‪ Skype‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Skype‬ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻲﺍﺳﻢ ‪ Skype‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ Skype‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬‫ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪ .
PAGE 62
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻃﻮﺍﺭﺉ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻃﺎﺭﺋﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﺪّ ‪ Skype‬ﺑﺪﻳﻼً ﻋﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﺭﺋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺍﺳﻤًﺎ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ‪ Skype‬ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪OK.‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﻢ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤًﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ Skype‬ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .
PAGE 63
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﺒﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ‪ Skype‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﺜﺮ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ Skype‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻟـ ‪.Skype‬‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪…Skype‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ)ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ( ‪ ، Contacts‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OPTIONS ‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Skype‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ…‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OPTIONS ‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ )ﻣﻨﻊ( ‪Block‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪ . OK‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ،Skype‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Off Video ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪ .OK‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪Video On‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ‪Skype‬ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﻧﻌﻢﻭﻗﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ‪.‬‬‫‪ 3 -‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Skype‬ﻭﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘُﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﻟﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ .Skype‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ Skype‬ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻚ ﻓﻲ ‪.Skype‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ…‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ…‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺳﺠّﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Skype‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﻓﻲﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ، Skype‬ﺣﺪﺩﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ)ﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ( ‪ Blocked contacts‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ‪ . OK‬ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OPTIONS ‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪5‬ﻏﻴّﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ‬‫‪.‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫‪ 6 -‬ﺣﺪﺩﺣﻔﻆ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪18.12‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺃﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Skype‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪www.skype.com/go/tou‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪www.skype.com/privacy‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﻹﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 68
‫ ‪ 1‬ﺷﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ TV Smart‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ ‪2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺃﻛﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.PIN‬‬‫ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻟﻠﺒﺎﻟﻐﻴﻦ ‪ 18‬ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OK‬ﺳﻴﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤؤﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫‪19.1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪TV Smart‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻّﻞﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪LED Smart Philips‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺸﻒ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪًﺍ‪ .
PAGE 69
‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OPTIONS ‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪Zoom‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻋﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻤّﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ )ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺜﻼً(‪.
PAGE 70
‫‪19.5‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪TV Smart‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ‪ TV Smart‬ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻣﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻚ ﺑـ ‪ ،TV Smart‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ TV Smart Philips‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻛﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ‪Smart TV‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.
PAGE 71
‫‪20.3‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪room Multi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪room Multi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪20.1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪room Multi‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ room Multi‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮّﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯَﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ room Multi‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻓﻖ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ Philips‬ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﻖ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﺫﻛﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 72
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬‬ ‫<)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ‪ < Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ‪Network settings‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( < )ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ( ‪.
PAGE 73
‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ…‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ)ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ( ‪  Share this‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺭﻣﺰﻩ ﻣﻦ ‪) TV Smart‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Facebook‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Twitter‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪) TV Smart‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ‪ "4"،‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ‪xxPFLxxx4).‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪ .2009‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ "‪ ،"5‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪ .2010‬ﺃﻣّﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪ "6‬ﻓﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪ 2011‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪ "7‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪ 2012‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪ "8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪2013.‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪MyRemote‬‬ ‫‪22.1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪MyRemote‬‬ ‫‪22.2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻨﺠﺰﻫﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺪّﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ MyRemote‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪. . .
PAGE 75
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ MyRemote‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ‪Philips‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺎًﺃﻳﻀ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ‪www.philips.com/support.‬‬ ‫‪.‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪Philips‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.
PAGE 76
‫• ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫• ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Fi-Wi‬ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫• ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺒﻜﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺒﻜﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‪ WEP‬ﺃﻭ ‪ WPA‬ﺃﻭ ‪ WPA2‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.WPS‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ( ‪Wi-Fi smart screen‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ( ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬‬ ‫<)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ‪Network settings < Setup‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( < ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ( ‪Wi-Fi smart screen‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 78
‫‪23‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺮﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺼﻨﻒ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪23.1‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Keywords ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻐﺔ( ‪ Audio language‬ﺃﻭ )ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ( ‪.
PAGE 79
‫• ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ ‪ -‬ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ -‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ‪ -‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) Keywords ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ )ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪،‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ( ‪ Network, wireless‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫)ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪،‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ( ‪.Network, wired‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ"‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﺮﺳﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ < ﺻﻮﺭﺓ < ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﻟﻮﻥ < ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩًﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪ WP) .‬ﻫﻮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ‪BL‬‬‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪(.
PAGE 81
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﺮﺳﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ RGB‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟـ ‪ISF‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔﻭﺿﻊ ‪ RGB‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺨﺒﻴﺮ ‪ ISF‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪.‬ﻓﻘﻂ ‪RGB‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ < ﺻﻮﺭﺓ < ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ >ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ <‬‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) ‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ(‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺸﻐّﻞ ﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،Perfect Natural Motion‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪Perfect‬‬ ‫‪.‬ﻭﺭﺷﻴﻘﺔ ﺳﻠﺴﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ‪Natural Motion‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.
PAGE 83
‫< ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫< ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫< ﻧﻤﻂ‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ < ﺻﻮﺕ < ﺟﻬﻴﺮ‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.(EasyLink‬‬ ‫‪ 4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ، ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ ‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪OPTIONS ‬‬‫)ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ)ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪.Picture and sound‬‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪. . .
PAGE 85
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ( ‪).Audio Out delay‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺇﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) Keywords ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﺮﻕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ( ‪Audio Out offset‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‪.
PAGE 86
‫‪23.4‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪Ambilight‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ‪ -‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Ambilight‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪.Ambilight‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ‪Ambilight‬‬ ‫ﺛﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻌﺎﻥ ﻟـ ‪ :Ambilight‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Ambilight+hue‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺭﻛﻴﺰﺓ ‪.Hue‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‪) Keywords ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ‪Network,‬‬ ‫)ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪،‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ( ‪.wireless‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‪ ، Ambilight+hue‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ‪Philips hue‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ Ambilight‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻮﺳّﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴؤﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ)ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ( ‪ Angle‬ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.‬ﺍﻟﺒﺼﻴﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪)  Ambilight‬ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ(‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‪) ‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 4‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ)ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ( ‪ Distance‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﻴﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ‬‫ﺗﺒﺘﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ‪ Ambilight‬ﺿﻌﻴﻔًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ‪) ‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 6‬ﺃﺧﻴﺮًﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ)ﺳﻄﻮﻉ( ‪ Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺒﺼﻴﻠﺔ‪ .
PAGE 89
‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ، ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪) OPTIONS‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪Options‬‬ ‫)ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ(ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﻭﺻﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪ 3 -‬ﺣﺪﺩﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ Ambilight‬ﻟـ ‪ISF‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ)ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ‪ ، Options‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ‪Audio‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻐﺔ( ‪language‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،ISF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺧﺒﻴﺮ ‪ ISF‬ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ ‪ Ambilight‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪.ISF‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ISF‬ﻟـ ‪.
PAGE 90
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ < ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ < ﻭﺻﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ < ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩﻭﺻﻔﻲ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪. . .
PAGE 91
‫‪24‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺪﻑﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲﺇﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﻔﺌﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺧﻀﺮﺍﺀ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Philips‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻟﺒﻠﺪﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪www.philips.com/TV‬‬ ‫‪24.
PAGE 92
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪24.4‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺒﻌﺎﺕ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺗؤﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪.
PAGE 93
‫• ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 1230.6‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 712‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪ 35.8‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪ 19.5±‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫• ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 1230.6‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 772‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪ 280‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪ 21±‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪، 60‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪• 720p - 5‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪, 60‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪• 1080i - 50‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪، 60‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪، 50‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪، 30‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪، 25‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪• 1080p - 24‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪، 30‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪، 25‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪• 2160p - 24‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬ ‫‪65PFx75x9‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 1445.
PAGE 94
‫ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫• ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 1082‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 683‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪ 223‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ‪±12.2‬‬ ‫ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 1061‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 616‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪ 35.8‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪ 13.7±‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫• ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 1061‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 676‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪ 240‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪ 16.4±‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪55PFx6609‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 1230.6‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 714.8‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪ 53.5‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪ 17.4±‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫• ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 1230.6‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 774.
PAGE 95
‫‪2، MPEG-4 Part 10 AVC (H264)، VC-1، WMV9‬‬ ‫• ﺿﻐﻄ‪/‬ﻔﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪AMR ،(v2/v1) AAC-HE ،AAC :‬‬‫‪NB، Dolby Digital، Dolby Digital Plus، DTS 2.0 +‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ( ‪Digital Out™، MPEG-1/2/2.5 Layer I/II/III‬‬ ‫)‪ v9.
PAGE 96
‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪Vision TP‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻮﻙ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪25.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﺤﻦ ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ "ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻦ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 97
below. Source: http://www.libpng.org/pub/png/libpng.html 25.4 Open source license libjpg (6b) This library is used to perform JPEG decoding tasks. This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the libjpg license, which can be found below. Source: http://www.ijg.org/ Acknowledgements and License Texts for any open source software used in this Philips TV.
PAGE 98
SquashFS (3.4) SquashFS is a compressed read-only file system for Linux. SquashFS compresses files, inodes and directories, and supports block sizes up to 1 MB for greater compression. SquashFS is also the name of free/open software, licensed under the GPL, for accessing SquashFS filesystems. This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the SquashFS license, which can be found below. Source: http://squashfs.sourceforge.
PAGE 99
and conditions of the electric-fence license, which can be found below. Source: http://perens.com/FreeSoftware/ElectricFence/el ectric-fence_2.1.13-0.1.tar.gz be found below. Source: http://libusb.wiki.sourceforge.net/LibusbCompat0.1 NTFS-3G Read/Write Driver (2010.5.22) NTFS-3G is an open source cross-platform implementation of the Microsoft Windows NTFS file system with read-write support. NTFS-3G often uses the FUSE file system interface, so it can run unmodified on many different operating systems.
PAGE 100
iputils (s20101006) The iputils package is set of small useful utilities for Linux networking. It was originally maintained by Alexey Kuznetsov. Source: http://www.skbuff.net/iputils/ Source: http://www.netfilter.org/projects/iptables/ bash (3.2.48) Bash is the shell, or command language interpreter, that will appear in the GNU operating system. Bash is an sh-compatible shell that incorporates useful features from the Korn shell (ksh) and C shell (csh). It is intended to conform to the IEEE POSIX P1003.
PAGE 101
Source: http://www.sqlite.org/download.html update or list files which were already stored. Source: http://www.gnu.org/software/tar/ AES (aes-src-29-04-09.zip) Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) is a specification for the encryption of electronic data. Used inside Philips libraries. Source: http://gladman.plushost.co.uk/oldsite/AES/ util-linux-ng (2.18) Various system utilities. Source: http://userweb.kernel.org/~kzak/util-linux-ng/ udhcpc (0.9.
PAGE 102
jquery (1.10.2) jQuery is a fast and concise JavaScript Library that simplifies HTML document traversing, event handling, animating, and Ajax interactions for rapid web development. Source: http://jquery.com/ Libupnp (1.2.1) The Linux* SDK for UPnP* Devices (libupnp) provides developers with an API and open source code for building control points, devices, and bridges that are compliant with Version 1.0 of the UPnP Device Architecture Specification. Source: http://upnp.sourceforge.
PAGE 103
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪.Philips‬‬ ‫‪26.1‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻭﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻐﺘﻚ‪.
PAGE 104
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪26.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﺠّﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ( ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺴﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﻓﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺯ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺋﺰ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻄﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺣﺪﻳﺜًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻮﺩﺗﻪ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ -‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻀّﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ‪www.
PAGE 105
‫ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺘﻚ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪26.5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ‪ /‬ﺇﺻﻼﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺒﻠﺪﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪. www.philips.com/support‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺭﻗﻤﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳُﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺭﻗﻤﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 106
‫‪27‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﻦ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻭﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻭﺯﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ‪ 25‬ﻛﺠﻢ ﺃﻭ ‪ 55‬ﺭﻃﻼً‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭّﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢٍ ﻣﺴﺘﻮٍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻤّﻞ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻤّﻞ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ‪ .
PAGE 107
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺤﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪41‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ(‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﺠﻬﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Philips‬ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻼﻣﺘﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻼﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ )‪ (EMF‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ ‪ Philips‬ﺑﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺗﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗؤﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗؤﻛﺪ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Vision TP‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺁﻣﻨًﺎ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻸﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪.
PAGE 109
‫‪Microsoft‬‬ ‫‪Skype‬‬ ‫‪Windows Media‬‬ ‫™‪Skype‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Media Windows‬ﺇﻣّﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘّﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Skype‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺇﻥ ‪ Microsoft.‬ﺃﻭ‪/‬ﻭ ‪© 2013 Skype‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ "‪ "S‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟـ‬ ‫‪.‬ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ‪Skype‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft PlayReady‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ‪ Skype‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟـ ‪ Skype‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪ .
PAGE 110
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 111
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪87 Ambilight+hue‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﻟﻮﻥ ‪88 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ‪7 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪86 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪88 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪88 Ambilight،‬‬ ‫‪89 Ambilight، ISF‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪14 CAM -‬‬ ‫‪16 CI+‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ( ‪36 DVB‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪37 DVB،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪12 DVI،‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪13 EasyLink‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪14 EasyLink،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪14 EasyLink،‬‬ ‫‪95 ESD‬‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫‪68 Facebook‬‬ ‫‪H‬‬ ‫‪34 HbbTV‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪16 HDCP،‬‬ ‫‪12 HDMI AR
PAGE 112
‫ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪55‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪34‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪34‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ‪36‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪38‬‬ ‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪86‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪84‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ‪85‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪85‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪85‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪56‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ ‪91‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ ‪83‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪9‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪56‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﻗّﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪49‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ‪49‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪28‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪27‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﻮﻝ ‪27‬‬ ‫ﻣؤﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ
PAGE 113
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪104‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ ‪83‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ‪82‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ‪82‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ‪84‬‬ ‫‪ 82‬ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪104‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ‪36‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ‪49‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪83‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪55‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ‪83‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ‪109‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪107‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺤﺔ ‪52‬‬ ‫‪ 18‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ‪Plus Pixel‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ‪95
PAGE 114
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺭﺍﺋﻊ ‪85‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ‪84‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ‪104‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪55‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﻥ ‪81‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ‪103‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ‪82‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪85‬‬ ‫ﺽ‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﻮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ ‪93‬‬ ‫ﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ‪91‬‬ ‫ﻉ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ‪25‬‬ ‫ﻍ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻣﺎ ‪83‬‬ ‫‪114‬‬
PAGE 115
Powered by TCPDF (www.tcpdf.org) Contact information Argentina 0800 444 7749 Buenos Aires 0810 444 7782 België / Belgique 070 700 035 (0,15€/min.) Bosna i Hercegovina 033 941 251 (Lokalni poziv) Brazil 0800 701 0245 Sao Paulo 2938 0245 Бълария 02 4916 273 (Национален номер) Česká republika 228880895 (Místní tarif) Danmark 3525 8314 Deutchland 0180 501 04 69 (0,14€/Min.) Ελλάδα 2111983028 (Εθνική κλήση) España 902 88 10 83 (0,10€ + 0,08€/min.